Buick 2009 Enclave Automobile User Manual

2009 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-29
Airbag System
......................................... 1-53
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-68
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-21
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-43
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-47
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-48
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-30
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-47
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-82
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-26
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under
the Hood
............................................. 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-49
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-53
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-90
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-98
Electrical System ...................................... 5-99
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-106
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-17
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, the
BUICK Emblem, and the name LACROSSE are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25783630 A First Printing
ii
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:
This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart
.:
Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+:
Fuses
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
I:
Charging System
Cruise Control
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
O:
Exterior Lamps
#:
Fog Lamps
iv
i:
j:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::
Oil Pressure
}:
Power
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Center Seat ...................................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-7
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-27
Lap Belt ......................................................1-28
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-29
Child Restraints .............................................1-29
Older Children ..............................................1-29
Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-50
Airbag System ...............................................1-53
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-67
Restraint System Check ..................................1-68
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-69
1-1
Front Seats
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
1-2
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel.
On seats with power lumbar, the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front of the control to increase lumbar support.
Press the rear of the control to decrease lumbar support.
Press the button once to activate the high heat setting.
Both indicator lights on the button will come on.
Press the button again to select the lower temperature
setting. Only one indicator light will come on. Press
the button a third time to turn the heat off.
This feature only works when the ignition is on.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seats.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-4
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even if when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do their job when
reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the seatback, and push the
head restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-6
Center Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, both sides of the
rear seatback can be folded down. This gives direct
access to the trunk. Make sure the front seats are not
reclined. If they are, the rear seatback(s) may not
fold down all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. There are
cupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To use
them, raise the seat cushion. In the upright position
the armrest acts as a back support for the front
row bench seat.
To lower the rear seatback,
pull the tab located on the
outboard side of the
seatback and fold the
seatback forward.
This seat can also be converted to a storage area by
lowering the armrest. See Center Console Storage
on page 2-47.
1-7
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback up until it
latches. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure
it is locked in position.
The seatbacks should be kept in the upright, locked
position when they are not being used to extend
the cargo area.
1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-13
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position, if
your vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
on page 1-28 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
1-22
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-29.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when
the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
1-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Press down on the release
lever (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-69.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pressing the release lever to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-24
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-25
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-27
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-28
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-22 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-30
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-32
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-33
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-34
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-37
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61 for
additional information.
{ CAUTION:
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-41
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-42
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
1-43
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Flip open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
1-44
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-45
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-46
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the headrest or head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-41 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the
vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-41 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1-47
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-48
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If
the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 for more
information.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-61 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-34 for more information,
including important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
CAUTION:
1-50
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61 for
additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-41 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 for
top tether anchor locations.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-34.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-51
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-52
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-61 for more information.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Airbag System
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
1-53
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-58.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-54
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 1-29 or Infants and Young Children on
page 1-33.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information.
1-55
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger side.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-56
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers, are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-58
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-53. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-58 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
1-60
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If
you have breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF
will be visible during the
system check.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
If you are using remote start to start your vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or OFF will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
1-61
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-62
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
1-63
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-50.
1-64
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-6.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-65
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-66
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,
could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-67
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-93.
1-68
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-69
✍ NOTES
1-70
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer ...............2-18
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Starting the Engine .......................................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29
Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-29
Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-35
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-36
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-37
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) ...........................................2-37
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-43
Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-43
Storage Areas ................................................2-47
Glove Box ...................................................2-47
Cupholders ..................................................2-47
Center Console Storage .................................2-47
Convenience Net ..........................................2-48
Sunroof .........................................................2-48
2-1
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
2-2
The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system.
The key has a transponder in the key head that matches
a decoder in the vehicle’s instrument panel. The key will
have PK3 stamped on it. If a replacement key or an
additional key is needed, it must be purchased from your
dealer/retailer or certified locksmith.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® III
Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2-19 for more
information on programming a new key.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 for
more information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3.
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
2-4
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2-7 for additional information.
Q
(Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
If Q is pressed again within five seconds the horn
may chirp. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for additional
information.
For vehicles with a content theft-deterrent system,
pressing Q may arm it. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-17.
For vehicles with a content theft-deterrent system,
pressing K may disarm it. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission
must be in P (Park).
L (Panic Alarm): Press to activate the alarm. The
headlamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for
two minutes. The alarm turns off when the ignition
is moved to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY for
the alarm to work.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If
enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps may come
on. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74.
2-5
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATTERY
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-6
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3 for additional
information.
/
(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or
until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension. The
first start must expire or be canceled to get two separate
10 minute starts.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
2-7
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-21 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• A door on the vehicle is open.
2-8
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-40
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display REMOTE
START DISABLED.
Vehicles that have the remote start feature are shipped
from the factory with the remote vehicle start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for additional
information. If your vehicle does not have the DIC
feature, and remote vehicle start was installed at the
dealer/retailer, you will need to have the dealer/retailer
enable or disable the system.
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
lock cylinder briefly counterclockwise to unlock the
driver’s door. Turn and hold it to unlock all the doors.
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside use the manual or power door locks.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
Power Door Locks
To lock or unlock all doors
from inside the vehicle,
use the power door
lock switch located on
either front door armrest.
Driver’s side shown
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors. Press
the top of the switch to unlock all doors.
2-9
If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system, the
vehicle is programmed to arm the system with the
power door lock switch. If your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC) this feature can be turned off.
See “Content Theft” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-74.
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle may have this feature. It delays the locking
of the vehicle’s doors for five seconds after the last
door is closed. Two chimes will sound when the power
door lock switch or the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed when a door
is open. If your vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC), a Delayed Locking warning will be
displayed.
The doors can be locked immediately by pressing the
power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the
transmitter a second time.
The delayed locking feature will not activate when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
You can program this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped. See
“Delayed Locking” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-74.
2-10
Automatic Door Lock
The doors are programmed to automatically lock when
the shift lever is moved into a forward gear.
If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after
the doors have been locked, place the shift lever
into P (PARK). You may also unlock all doors using the
power door lock switch or unlock one door using the
inside manual door lock.
The automatic door lock feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factory to
unlock when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), there
are different programming options for unlocking the
doors automatically. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-74.
Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.
To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has the following:
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult to
lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be
locked with the power door lock switch.
To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the key
could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always
remember to take the key with you.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-11
Trunk
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
2-12
Opening the Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more
information.
The ignition must be off, or the transmission must be in
(P) Park to open the trunk.
Remote Trunk Release
This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside the
vehicle using the power door lock switch.
Press and hold the top of
the driver’s or front
passenger’s power door
lock switch to unlock
the trunk.
The vehicle must be in (P) Park to unlock the trunk.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Trunk Lid Pull Down Handle and
Tie-Down Features
Your vehicle has a trunk lid pull down handle (A)
located on the inside of the trunk lid on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. Use the handle to pull down the trunk
lid when closing it.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the trunk latch of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. If ever
needed, pull the emergency trunk release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.
Your vehicle also has a tie-down feature (B) located on
the inside the trunk lid on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle that can be used to secure the trunk lid when
large items are stored in the trunk.
2-13
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The switches on the driver’s door armrest are used to
control each of the windows. The power window
switches work while the ignition is in ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-22. Each passenger door has its own
window switch.
To lower the window, press and hold the front of the
switch to the first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the window, pull up and hold
the front of the switch.
2-15
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the window
completely without holding the switch. Press the front of
the switch to the second position and release.
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can be detached from the center retainer and slid along
the rod to cover different areas of the front window
and turned to cover the side windows.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up
on the switch.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Window Lockout
Swing down the sun visors and lift the cover to expose
the vanity mirror. Do not drive with the cover lifted
due to possible glare impeding other drivers behind or
to the side of the vehicle.
o
(Window Lockout): The driver’s window switches
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of
the switch to prevent the rear passengers from
using their window switches. The driver can still control
all the windows and the front passenger can control
their own window with the lockout on. Press the left side
of the switch to return to normal window operation. A
red bar on the right side of the switch indicates that the
lockout is off.
2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
The vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm system
can be activated when the key is removed from
the ignition and the power door lock switch of either the
driver’s or front passenger’s door is used to lock the
vehicle. The door needs to be in the open position when
pressing the power door lock switch. The system will
not arm if the door is closed when the power door
lock switch is pressed. This system can be activated
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
“CONTENT THEFT” under “Customization Menu Items”
in DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74.
Your vehicle may have a
red light located on top of
the instrument panel,
toward the center of the
vehicle and near the
windshield, that will flash
slowly when the system is
armed.
The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to be activated
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
“CONTENT THEFT” under “Customization Menu Items”
in DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74. While
armed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lock
switch. The remote alarm will sound if someone
tampers with the trunk or enters the vehicle without
using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
key to unlock the doors. The horn will sound and
the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes. The
system will also cut off the fuel supply, preventing the
vehicle from being driven.
When the doors are locked using the power door
lock switch of either front door, the red light, if your
vehicle has one, will start flashing at a fast rate,
indicating that the system is arming. After all the doors
are locked there will be a time delay and then the
red light, if your vehicle has one, will begin to flash at a
very slow rate, indicating the system is armed.
2-17
Arming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when the RKE transmitter is
used to lock the doors after the key is removed from
the ignition. The red light, if your vehicle has one,
will come on to indicate that the system is arming. After
all doors are closed and locked, and after a time
delay, the red light, if your vehicle has one, will begin
flashing at a very slow rate to show the system is armed.
PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer
Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Arming Confirmation
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Your vehicle may have a red light located on top of the
instrument panel, towards the center of the vehicle
and near the windshield, that will flash slowly to confirm
when the system is armed.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when the RKE transmitter
is used to unlock the doors. The red light, if your
vehicle has one, will go out to show that the system is
disarmed.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when the key is used to
unlock the doors. The red light, if your vehicle has
one, will stop flashing when the system is disarmed. If
you would like the key to disarm the alarm system,
see “CONTENT THEFT” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for more information.
2-18
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III® uses a transponder in the ignition
key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that the wrong
key has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down
the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not
work and fuel will stop flowing to the engine.
If someone tries to start the vehicle again with the
wrong key, the vehicle will not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged to do so because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED warning message
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on,
there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7 for more information.
2-19
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to accept
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the master key in the ignition and start
the engine. If the engine will not start, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of removing the
original key.
2-20
5. The SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message
on the DIC will turn off, once the key has been
programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message went
on due to how quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message
appears and stays on the DIC while the vehicle is being
driven, the engine will be able to be restarted if it is
turned off. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. The vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-28 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
and the brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand, see your
dealer/retailer.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. This is the only position in
which the ignition key can be inserted or removed.
2-21
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from left to
right while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the radio and windshield wipers
while the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn
the key clockwise.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The
switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
2-22
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is in the
ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-56 for more information.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
Power to these accessories continues to work for
10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-23
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
2-24
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting. Some models have
an internal thermostat in the cord which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the diagonal
brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Active Fuel Management™
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
The vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
fuel economy. When greater power is required, such
as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a
freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should be plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
The vehicle’s automatic
transmission may have a
shift lever on the steering
column or on the console
between the seats.
Console Shift Lever
There is also a display
located on the instrument
panel cluster that
indicates the vehicle’s
gear position.
2-26
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-29. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.
The positions for the shift lever are:
P (Park): This position locks the vehicle’s front wheels.
It is the best position to use when the engine is
started because the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. You must fully apply the brakes
before shifting from P (Park) when the ignition is
in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease
pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out
of Park on page 2-32.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to get it out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-19.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-27
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for more than 25 miles
(40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h) may
damage the transmission. Also, shifting into
2 (Second) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in 3 (Third) or D (Drive)
instead of 2 (Second).
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy. If more power is needed
for passing, and the vehicle is:
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You
can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, while
using the brakes off and on.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle will automatically shift
down to the next gear and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding. See Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
2-28
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down, then
push down the parking
brake pedal.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, and push the parking brake pedal.
While you lift your foot off the parking brake, the parking
brake pedal will follow it to the released position.
A warning chime will sound and PARKING BRAKE ON
will display in the DIC if the parking brake is set, the
ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). For more information see Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-35 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If
you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-28.
2-29
Steering Column Shift Lever
Console Shift Lever
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as
it will go.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle
and then to the left.
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29
for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
2-30
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This
happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then
it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park).
To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in this
section.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 for more information.
2-31
Shifting Out of Park
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into P (Park).
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
4. Press the shift lever button
The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in P (Park)
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of a
an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 5-41.
Console Shift
If the console shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park):
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN position. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-21 for more information.
2-32
5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Column Shift
If the column shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. See
Ignition Positions on page 2-21 for more information.
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
2-33
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-29.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-28.
2-34
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to move it for a clearer
view behind the vehicle.
Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and
pull it for nighttime use.
If the vehicle has OnStar®, the mirror has a day/night
control located at the bottom. Turn the control to
the right for the night position. Turn the control to the
front for the day position.
Vehicles with OnStar have three control buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer
for more information on the system and how to
subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on
page 2-39 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror that reduces the glare of lights from behind
the vehicle. Press the AUTO button located in the lower
center of the mirror to turn automatic dimming on and
the ( (off) button located next to the AUTO button
to turn automatic dimming off.
It the vehicle has the OnStar® System. The automatic
dimming feature is turned on or off by pressing O
for about three seconds. This button is located on the
lower part of the mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three control buttons
located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System
on page 2-39 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Adjust the mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle.
Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and
side to side.
2-35
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit
a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
2-36
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
< or = (Rear Window Defogger): Depending on the
vehicle, press to heat the mirrors. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-25 or Climate Control
System on page 3-21 for more information.
Object Detection Systems
{ CAUTION:
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 3 mph
(5 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to
an object up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at
least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
2-37
The display is located
above the rear window and
can be seen by looking
over your right shoulder.
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from the rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Repeated beeping will occur when you are
closer than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display will then briefly
illuminate to let you know the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
2-38
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected
object:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red
lights/continuous beep
amber/amber/red
lights flashing and
continuous beep
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
OnStar® System
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean, a red URPA
display light may illuminate when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). Keep the rear bumper free of
mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-93.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate.
Once the attached object is removed, URPA will
return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If
the keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock
the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most
vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,
with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press
the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact
Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
2-39
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After
the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a
monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If a
payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all
services, including airbag notification and emergency
services, may be deactivated and no longer available.
For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca
(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with
an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. To
check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-40
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few
simple voice commands to browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-110 for
more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-41
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is
pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the
airbags or AACN system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding
the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was hit). When
the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling
is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’s
GPS location so they can provide services where it is
located.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is
in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where the wireless service provider OnStar has
hired for that area has coverage, network capacity
and reception when the service is needed, and
technology that is compatible with the OnStar service.
Not all services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-42
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar
advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not be functioning
properly. Press the OnStar button and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired
and all services have been deactivated. Press the
OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
2-43
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
To program up to three devices:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Programming can only occur with the vehicle in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off.
When programming a garage door, park outside of the
garage. Park directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be
sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
2-44
2. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the two
outside buttons at the same time, releasing only
when the Universal Home Remote indicator light
begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will erase
the factory settings or all previously programmed
buttons.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
3. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
4. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button that you would like to use to
control the garage door and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter
button until Step 5 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 4 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
5. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
6. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 7 through 9 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming Steps
7 through 9.
7. After Steps 1 through 6 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
8. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 9.
2-45
9. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press
and hold the Universal Home Remote button,
chosen in Step 4 to control the garage door, for
two seconds, and then release it. If the garage door
does not move, press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds, and then release it.
Again, if the door does not move, press and hold
the same button a third time for two seconds,
and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step
4 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 5 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 3 of “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 2,
as this will erase all previous programming from the
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Using Universal Home Remote
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Operation can only occur with the vehicle in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
2-46
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Storage Areas
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
Glove Box
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
Cupholders may be built into the front center console,
front portion of the front center seat and rear armrest of
the vehicle.
Center Console Storage
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier in
this section, beginning with Step 3.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
If your vehicle has a five-passenger console, the center
console has a padded cover that can be used as an
armrest. Lift the armrest cover to access a storage bin
with a coin holder and a CD holder. Located under
the cover is a card clip.
If your vehicle has a six-passenger console, there is a
flip and fold center armrest that allows you to choose
between a three-passenger front row bench seat
or a center console. For more information see Center
Seat on page 1-7. Flip the center armrest down
and it can be used as an armrest for the driver and
passenger seat. Lift the armrest cover to access
the storage area.
2-47
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes a sliding
glass panel and a sunshade.
The sunroof control is
on the headliner, by the
map lamps.
The sunroof control works only when the ignition is on
or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-22.
2-48
To raise the sunroof to the vent position, open the
sunshade by hand, then press the back of the control.
Push and hold the front of the control to close the
sunroof from the vent position.
With the sunroof in the vent position, press and release
the back of the control to express-open the sunroof.
The sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof.
To stop the express-open function, press the back
of the control again.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
control. To stop the sunroof, release the control.
The sunshade must be closed manually.
The sunroof panel cannot be opened or closed if your
vehicle has an electrical failure.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System ......................................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-15
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-16
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-17
Theater Dimming ..........................................3-17
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-17
Perimeter Lighting .........................................3-18
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................3-18
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................3-18
Electric Power Management ...........................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-20
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-21
Climate Controls ............................................3-21
Climate Control System .................................3-21
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-25
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-31
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32
Tachometer .................................................3-32
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-32
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-34
Charging System Light ..................................3-35
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-35
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ........3-36
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-37
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light ...........................................3-37
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ........3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-38
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-39
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-40
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-42
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-43
Security Light ...............................................3-43
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-43
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-44
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-44
Headlamps Suggested Light ...........................3-44
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-45
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-45
Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-45
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-45
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-46
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-47
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-47
3-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-47
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-48
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..........................3-54
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-56
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-74
Audio System(s) .............................................3-82
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-82
Radio(s) ......................................................3-83
Using an MP3 ..............................................3-95
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-98
Bluetooth® ...................................................3-99
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-110
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-110
Radio Reception .........................................3-112
Backglass Antenna ......................................3-113
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-113
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-113
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.
B. Interior Lamps on page 3-16.
C. Exterior Lamps on page 3-13. Fog Lamps on
page 3-15.
D. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
E. Cruise Control on page 3-10.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-31.
G. DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-48
(If Equipped) and Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
I. Audio System(s) on page 3-82.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
Hood Release on page 5-11.
Parking Brake on page 2-29.
Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
Horn on page 3-6.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-110
(If Equipped).
Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-29.
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-20.
Climate Control System on page 3-21 or Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-25.
Glove Box on page 2-47.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
If the vehicle has a tilt wheel the steering wheel can be
adjusted to a higher or lower position.
Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others
that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
The lever used to tilt the
steering wheel is located
on the left side of the
steering column.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, pull the lever towards you, move the
wheel to a comfortable position, and then release the
lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering
wheel while driving.
3-6
Telescoping Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If the vehicle has a telescoping column on the steering
wheel it adjusts the distance of the steering wheel
to the driver without having to move the driver’s seat.
The lever that makes this
adjustment is located on
the left side of the steering
column and behind the tilt
lever, if the vehicle has this
feature.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To adjust the steering wheel, pull the steering wheel
column lever down and push or pull the steering wheel
to a comfortable position. Then pull the lever up to
lock the wheel in place.
Do not drive the vehicle unless the telescoping column
is locked.
G:
Turn and Lane Change Signals
2:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N:
Windshield Wipers
LQ:
Windshield Washer
Flash-to-Pass.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if
the high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Move the lever up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is
complete.
The lever returns to its original position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-50 for turn
signal bulb replacement procedures and Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-99 for location of fuses.
A chime will sound if the turn signal is left on for more
than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
momentarily to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or
blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-53.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers stop
after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more
wipe cycles.
Windshield Washer
9 (Off):
L Q (Washer Fluid):
Turns the wipers off.
6 (Delay):
Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow.
6 (Low Speed):
For steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen
or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the
windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely.
There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the
window and then either stop or return to your preset
speed.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
3-9
Cruise Control
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit wheel
spin and the cruise control automatically turns off. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.
3-10
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off.
The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.
[ (Cancel):
Press to cancel cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If cruise control is set at a desired speed and the
brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.
However, it does not need to be reset.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed. See Instrument Panel Cluster on
page 3-31.
Once your vehicle reaches a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the steering
wheel. The vehicle goes back to the previously selected
speed and stays there.
{ CAUTION:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
1. Press the
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
T button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
will slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the
brakes are applied the cruise control will turn off.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased by
turning off the cruise control or the ignition.
3-12
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
The control located to the
left of the cluster on the
instrument panel, operates
the exterior lamps.
P (On/Off): Briefly turn the control to this position
to turn off the automatic light control. Briefly turn to this
position again to turn the automatic light control on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position
to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
< (Parking Lamps):
It controls the following systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
3-13
2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
listed below.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door is
opened when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/OFF
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the headlamps or parking
lamps are on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. DRL lamps are required
to function at all times on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
# (Fog lamps) (If Equipped):
Push the fog lamps
button to turn them on and off. See Fog Lamps
on page 3-15 for additional information.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
• The parking brake is released.
While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The turn
signal, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
3-14
When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
and the vehicle’s headlamps and parking lamps will turn
on. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps
will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off and then do one of the following:
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and
back to AUTO.
This feature is not available for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it
is dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. The parking lamps remain on
and the headlamps turn off. The fog lamps also go on
if they were on previously.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located in the
center of the exterior lamps control on the left side of
the steering column.
#:
Press to turn the lamps on or off.
While the high-beam headlamps are on, the fog lamps
are off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on
after the ignition has been turned to off, the exterior
lamps will turn off after about 10 minutes. This protects
the battery from being drained.
Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on,
if they are still needed.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
3-15
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The interior lamps control
is located next to the
exterior lamps control and
to the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
The instrument panel lights can be brightened or
dimmed by pressing the center knob of the interior lamp
controls until it pops out. Turn the knob clockwise to
brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them.
Courtesy Lamps
Courtesy lamps come on to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle. These lamps will come on when the
interior lamp control is in the door position and any
door is opened.
9 (Off):
Turn the control to this position to disable
courtesy lamps, entry lighting, delayed entry lighting,
and delayed exit lighting.
1 (Door): Turn the control to this position to turn the
interior lamps on when any door is open and when
the ignition key is removed from the ignition.
Entry Lighting
The courtesy lamps come on and stay on for a set time
whenever the interior lamp control is in the door position
and the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed.
+ (On): Turn the control to this position to turn on the
interior lamps.
The lamps stay on while a door is opened and then
turn off automatically about 25 seconds after it is closed.
If the UNLOCK button is pressed and a door is not
opened, the lamps will turn off after about 25 seconds.
The interior lamps can be controlled, or automatically
turned on or off under certain conditions. They are
explained in the following text.
The courtesy lamps turn off when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN or START. They will come on again
when a door is opened.
3-16
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed Exit Lighting
Delayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
This feature can be programmed either on or off
using the Driver Information Center. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 under INT (Interior)
LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED. When activated, the interior
will be lit for a short period of time after the ignition key
is removed from the ignition.
After all the doors have been closed, the delayed entry
lighting feature will continue to work until one of the
following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• 25 seconds has passed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five second fade out of
the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.
The ignition must be off and the interior lamp control
must be in the door position for delayed exit lighting
to work. When the ignition key is removed, interior
illumination will activate and remain on until one of
the following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• 25 seconds has passed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.
3-17
Perimeter Lighting
Electric Power Management
Perimeter lighting provides a period of exterior vehicle
lighting. Perimeter lighting activates when the key
is removed from the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked
using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The amount of time the exterior lamps will remain on
can be programmed using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “EXIT LIGHT DELAY” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for additional information.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Overhead Console Reading
Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps located on the
overhead console. Press the lens to turn them on and off.
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps located near
the rear assist handles. Press the lens to turn them
on and off.
3-18
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine
idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This helps prevent the vehicle’s battery from draining
in case the interior courtesy lamps, reading lamps, trunk
lamp, underhood lamp, glove box lamps, or sun visor
vanity lamps, if equipped, are accidently left on. If any of
these lamps are left on while the ignition is off, they will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps will not
come back on again until one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is turned on.
• The interior lamps control is turned off, then to
door or on.
3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets enable power electrical
equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
The vehicle has 12-volt outlets. One outlet is located on
the center console below the climate controls. There may
be another outlet located inside the center storage
console or in the flip and fold console.
Open the cover to use the outlet. Be sure to close the
cover when the outlet is not in use.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
3-20
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a removable ashtray and cigarette
lighter. The cigarette lighter may be located under the
climate control system. The removable ashtray can
be placed into the front console cupholder.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When the heating element is ready, it will pop back
out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system the heating, cooling and ventilation can
be controlled.
For vehicles with the remote start feature and it is
activated, the climate control system automatically cools
the vehicle if the temperature is greater than 90°F (32°C)
and heats the vehicle if the temperature is below 37°F
(3°C). If the temperature is between 37°F (3°C) and
90°F (32°C), the last control setting selected when the
engine was running will be used. Normal operation and
the last setting of the climate control system will return
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
3-21
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the
airflow inside the vehicle.
Select from the following air delivery modes:
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Recirculation
E. Air Conditioning
F. Rear Window
Defogger
OFF: Turn the fan control knob to this position to turn
the climate control system off.
9 (Fan):
Turn the knob by this symbol, located on
the left side of the climate control panel, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed is temporarily reduced when adjusting
modes, but resumes the original speed when the
transition to the new mode is complete.
3-22
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
If driving in city traffic, and the vehicle is stopped and
idling, or the weather is hot, turning on the recirculation
mode helps to prevent the air inside the vehicle from
becoming stale. After five minutes recirculate will allow
some outside air into the vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward
the windshield. Slightly cooler air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and warmer air is directed
to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed toward the side window outlets and
windshield.
In this mode, the system automatically uses outside air.
The air conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is divided between the windshield and
the side window outlets, and the floor outlets. In this
mode, the system turns recirculation off and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is near or below freezing. Pressing the recirculation
button will have no effect other than turning on the
indicator light while in defog mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode clears the windows of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets, with some air directed to the floor
outlets. In this mode, the system turns recirculation off
and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is near or below freezing. Pressing
the recirculation button will have no effect other than
turning on the indicator light while in defrost mode.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light turns on
to show that the air conditioning is on. Air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch is
on. The indicator light changes with each button press
even when conditions prevent operation.
On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up, open
the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system
to operate more efficiently.
For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:
H mode.
Press h .
Press # .
1. Select
2.
3.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this, after five minutes recirculate will allow
some outside air into the vehicle.
3-23
h (Recirculate): Press to turn the recirculation mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation
is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly heat or
cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
the outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode. To prevent the air inside the vehicle
from becoming stale, after five minutes recirculation lets
some outside air into the vehicle.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger stays on for
about 20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger only runs for about 20 minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by turning
off the engine.
Rear Window Defogger
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press turn the rear window defogger on or
off. An indicator light comes on to show that the
rear window defogger is on.
3-24
The heated outside rearview mirrors, help to clear fog
or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation
can be controlled.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode, and the fan speed. There might be a
delay of two to three minutes before the fan comes on
when the automatic operation is used in cold weather.
For the automatic system to function, the temperature
must be set between 61°F (15°C) and 89°F (32°C).
1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
AUTO
OFF
Fan Control
Display
Air Conditioning
Recirculation
PASS
H. Heated Seats
I. Rear Window
Defogger
J. Air Delivery Mode
Controls
K. Defrost
2. Press the PASS button or the y or z on the
passenger side to turn the passenger temperature
set on and off. When turned on, the passenger
temperature will be the same as the driver setting.
Press y or z on passenger side to adjust the
passenger temperature setting.
When the passenger’s temperature set is off,
the passenger display will be off and the driver’s set
temperature will be for the driver and passenger.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will start
out blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed for warm up will depend on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has elapsed
since the vehicle was last driven.
3-25
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield.
For more information on the solar sensor, see
“Sensors” later in this section.
4. Press OFF to turn the climate control system off.
Only the rear defog and heated seats will function.
Press AUTO or any other button except the heated
seats or rear defog to turn the climate control system
back on.
This control has four types of operation.
• Automatic can set/change the temperature only.
AUTO and temperature only will appear on the
display.
• Semi-Automatic Fan can set/change the
temperature and mode. The fan operates
automatically. The temperature and mode
will appear on the display.
• Semi-Automatic Mode can set/change the
temperature and fan speed. The mode operates
automatically. The fan speed and temperature
will appear on the display.
• Manual can set/change the temperature, mode and
fan. The fan speed, temperature, and mode will
appear on the display.
3-26
For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate
control system automatically regulates the inside
temperature of the vehicle when the remote start system
is activated. Normal operation and the last setting of
the climate control system will return after the key
is turned on.
Manual Operation
During daylight hours, the instrument panel brightness
control might need to be adjusted to the highest setting,
in order to see the indicator lights for the various
climate control settings.
OFF: Press to turn the climate control system off.
y z (Temperature): Press to manually adjust the
temperature inside the vehicle. Press y or z on the
driver or passenger side to increase or decrease the
temperature. The display will show the selected
temperature.
z 9 / 9 y (Fan Control): Press the fan control
buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Pressing
the arrows cancels the automatic operation and places
the system in manual or semi-automatic mode. Press the
AUTO button to return to automatic operation. If the
airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air filter may need to
be replaced. For more information see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
Air Delivery Mode Controls: Use these buttons to
change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor, with some
air directed to the side window outlets and a small
amount to the windshield.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets, with some air directed to
the windshield and the side window outlets.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
- (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor
outlets and side windows. In this mode, the system turns
recirculation off and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is near or below freezing.
Pressing the recirculation button will have no effect
other than turning on the indicator light while in floor/
defog mode.
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with some air directed to the side windows. In this mode,
the system automatically turns off the recirculation and
runs the air conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is near or below freezing. Pressing the
recirculation button will have no effect other than turning
on the indicator light while in defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air
conditioning compressor on and off. An indicator
light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.
The indicator light changes with each button press
even when conditions prevent operation.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. This mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
Recirculation is not available while in the floor, defrost, or
floor/defog modes. Using recirculation for long periods of
time may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too
dry. Recirculation mode has a five minute timer after
which the system allows for some fresh outside air into
the vehicle to maintain interior air quality.
3-27
Rear Window Defogger
Sensors
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. The rear
window defogger will only work when the engine
is running.
The solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar heat
and the air inside of the vehicle. This information is used
to maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed, and the
air delivery system. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of the
instrument panel, near the windshield, or the system will
not work properly.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear
window defogger on and off. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger turns off about 20 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger only runs for about 20 minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by turning
off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors, help to clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
( (Heated Seats):
Press to turn the driver or
passenger heated seats on and off. See Heated
Seats on page 1-3 for additional information.
3-28
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheels located between the center
outlets to open and close the outlets. Move the lever
in the center of each air outlet to adjust the direction
of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• This vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting it may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-29.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and turn the
windshield wipers on.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF when the windshield
wipers are in the upright position.
3. Raise the hood.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
5. Peel back the hood weather-strip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to the
center of the hood.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter is located in
the engine compartment below the air inlet grille,
near the passenger’s side windshield wiper arm.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.
The filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering
the air conditioning module. The filter needs to be
changed periodically to keep the air conditioning working
at its best. For information on how often to change the
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.
7. Remove the air inlet grille.
8. Remove the water deflector panel.
3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
9. Remove the old air filter.
10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
See Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13
for the type of filter to use. Make sure it slides
under the compartment retainers.
11. Reverse Steps 1 through 8.
For best climate control performance, re-installation of a
clean air filter is required.
3-30
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show
how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safely
and economically.
Base level shown, Uplevel similar
3-31
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the driver
information center. You can set a Trip A and Trip B
odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-48.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the odometer/trip switch
on the instrument panel cluster.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for several
seconds, then flashes for
several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of
the old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-61 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
3-32
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-53.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have
the vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.
3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61 for
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a has a passenger airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is
started, the passenger
airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF for
several seconds as a
system check.
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF to let you know the status of the
right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger frontal
airbag is enabled (may inflate).
3-34
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag status indicator,
it means that the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information, including important safety
information.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and the parking brake
is not applied, there is a brake problem. Have your
brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-35
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, a chime will
sound and you should pull off the road and stop carefully.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the
pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
3-36
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-35.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
all brake related DIC messages.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle has
a Traction Control
System (TCS)
warning light.
inspected as soon as possible. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-7 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6 for more information.
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
may come on for the
following reasons:
If this warning light comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TCS and, if your vehicle has
this feature, the StabiliTrak® system.
The TCS warning light will come on briefly when the
engine is started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. This
light will also come on when the traction control button is
pressed disabling the system.
If the TCS warning light stays on or comes on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the ignition
off then back on. If the light still stays on or comes back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the traction control system and, if your
vehicle has this feature, the StabiliTrak® system
• If the traction control button located on the instrument
panel is pressed, turning the system off. This light will
come on and stay on. To turn the system back on,
press the button again and the warning light should
turn off. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-8.
• If the system is affected by an engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the warning
light will come on.
If the light comes on and stays on for an extended
period of time when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.
3-37
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-31. The vehicle’s
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-31
for more information.
3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has a gage
that shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves towards the H, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same thing as the warning
light. It means that the engine coolant has overheated.
If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-31.
Low Coolant Warning Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it comes on briefly
when you turn your ignition
on as a bulb check only.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started and
provides information about
tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it
is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-54 for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-62
for more information.
3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
3-40
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling
on acceleration. These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
3-41
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
II (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-42
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17.
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes on,
it means that service is
required for your vehicle.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
light. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
If this light is blinking, a chime will sound indicating
low engine oil.
3-43
Reduced Engine Power Light
If the reduced engine
power light is on, a chime
will sound and a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
If the reduced engine power light is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while the reduced engine power light is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to an authorized GM
dealer/retailer as soon as possible for service.
3-44
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
Headlamps Suggested Light
This light will come
on when the use of
headlamps is suggested.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition is
on. If the light stays on, a
chime will sound indicating
your windshield washer
fluid is low.
Trunk Ajar Light
This light will come on and
a chime will sound if the
trunk is ajar and the
vehicle is not in P (Park).
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-35 for more
information.
Try closing the trunk again. Never drive with the
trunk open.
Door Ajar Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
When the ignition is on,
this light will stay on until
all doors are closed
and completely latched.
You will hear a chime if a door is unlatched after the
engine is started and the vehicle is not in PARK (P).
This light, comes on if
a condition exists that
requires the vehicle to
be taken in for service.
If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
3-45
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage indicates
about how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank when the
ignition is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but
it took more, or less, than half of the tank’s capacity
to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or accelerating.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
is turned off.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuel
left, but you should get more fuel soon.
3-46
Low Fuel Warning Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have a low fuel light. It is a circle
located on the fuel gage and will come on and a chime
will sound periodically when the vehicle is low on fuel.
The light will go off when fuel is added to the fuel tank.
Your vehicle may have a Driver Information
Center (DIC).
It will also come on for a few seconds when the ignition
is turned on as a check to indicate it is working. If it
does not come on then, have it fixed.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), a
LOW FUEL message will appear. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
Check Gas Cap Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on if your
gas cap is not securely
fastened.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in
the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the center outlets.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the uplevel DIC will display the WELCOME
DRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is used, and
then the information that was last displayed before the
engine was turned off.
The base level DIC displays the odometer and trip
odometers only.
The uplevel DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,
fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system, and
compass display information. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is detected. In addition,
the uplevel DIC displays phone numbers that are
called using the OnStar® system, if equipped.
See OnStar® System on page 2-39.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40 for more
information.
3-47
The outside air temperature automatically appears in
the bottom right corner of the uplevel DIC display when
viewing the trip/odometer screens, fuel screens and
some of the gages screens. If the outside air temperature
is at or below 37°F (3°C), the temperature reading will
toggle between displaying the outside temperature and
the word ICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with
the system that controls the temperature display, the
letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit) will appear
on the display. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
DIC Buttons
The uplevel DIC also allows some features to be
customized or personalized. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for more information.
TRIP/ODO (Trip/Odometer): For vehicles with the
base level DIC, press this button to display the odometer
and trip distance.
DIC Operation and Displays
For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, press this button
to display the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,
and average speed.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the
instrument panel. Depending on whether your vehicle
has the base level or uplevel DIC, the buttons and
modes available will differ.
The base level buttons are the trip/odometer and
English/Metric buttons.
The uplevel buttons are the trip/odometer, fuel, gages,
set/reset, and option buttons.
The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
3-48
Uplevel shown
E/M (English/Metric)**: For vehicles with the base
level DIC, press this button to select between English
or Metric units.
For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, to select between
English or Metric units, see “Units” later in this section.
. (Fuel)*:
Press this button to display the fuel
range and average fuel economy.
2 (Gages)*: Press this button to display the battery
voltage, oil life, and tire pressure readings, if equipped.
r (Set/Reset)*: Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
4 (Option)*: Press this button to display the units,
language, personalization, compass zone, and compass
calibration. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-74 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) on
page 3-54 for more information.
t (Traction Control): Press this button to turn
traction control on or off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-7 for more information.
Press and hold this button to turn StabiliTrak® off,
for vehicles with this feature. Press this button again
to turn both traction control and StabiliTrak® on. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information.
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
*These buttons are only available on vehicles with the
uplevel DIC.
**This button is only available on vehicles with the base
level DIC.
Trip/Odometer Menu Items
TRIP/ODO (Trip Odometer): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/odometer button until the odometer
displays. This mode shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the trip/odometer button until A or B displays.
This mode shows the current distance traveled in either
miles or kilometers since the last reset for each trip
odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
The display will show the odometer on the top line and
the trip odometer information, either A or B, on the
bottom line.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
briefly pressing the set/reset button on vehicles with the
uplevel DIC or by briefly pressing and holding the trip
odometer button on vehicles with the base level
DIC while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
3-49
There is also a retroactive trip odometer function that
performs the following for each trip odometer:
• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph (5 km/h)
during the current ignition cycle, this function will
set the trip odometer to the distance driven
during the current ignition cycle.
• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometer
to the distance driven during the previous ignition
cycle plus the distance driven during the current
ignition cycle.
Press and hold the set/reset button on vehicles with
the uplevel DIC or the trip/odometer button on vehicles
with the base level DIC for three seconds, then release
the button. The retroactive trip odometer value will be set
into the currently displayed trip odometer.
Time Elapsed (Uplevel Only)
Press the trip/odometer button until TIME ELAPSED :00
displays. This mode is like a stopwatch, in that you can
clock the time it takes to get from one point to another.
Each of the fields for the hours, minutes, and seconds
are two numeric digits.
3-50
Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the
set/reset button on vehicles with the uplevel DIC to start
the timing feature. Press the set/reset button again to
stop it. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle,
during a trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature will
automatically start timing where it left off when you last
stopped. To reset it, press and hold the set/reset button
for about 1.5 seconds. The display will return to zero.
Press the trip/odometer button to exit from the TIME
ELAPSED display.
Average Speed (Uplevel Only)
Press the trip/odometer button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This mode shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
(km/h). This average is calculated based on the various
vehicle speed recorded since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value, press the trip/odometer button to
display AVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold the
set/reset button on vehicles with the uplevel DIC.
The display will return to zero.
Fuel Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
. (Fuel):
Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Fuel Range
Press the fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This mode shows the approximate number of remaining
miles or kilometers the vehicle can be driven without
refueling.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This mode shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item
was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Gages Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
Fuel range is based on several factors, including
distance traveled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this mode may read one number, but if the vehicle
is driven on a freeway, the number may change even
though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This
is because different driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces
better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot
be reset.
2 (Gages):
If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW will
display followed by the LOW FUEL message. See “LOW
FUEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
a DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Battery
Press the gages button until BATTERY displays.
This mode shows the current battery voltage.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal.
See Electric Power Management on page 3-18 for more
information.
3-51
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Press the gages button until OIL LIFE displays. This
mode shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful
life. If you see OIL LIFE 99% on the display, that means
99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life
system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), press the gages button until FRONT TIRE
PRESSURE displays. This mode shows the pressure
for the front tires. To view the pressure for the rear
tires, press the gages button again until REAR TIRE
PRESSURE displays. The tire pressure will be shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You should
change your oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine
oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
The display will show 100% when the system is reset.
3-52
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes or blanks
instead of a value, there may be a problem with
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
Option Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
4 (Option):
Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Units
Press the option button until UNITS displays. This mode
allows you to select between English or Metric units
of measurement. Once in this mode, press the set/reset
button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Language
Press the option button until the language screen
displays. This mode allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear. Once in this mode,
press the set/reset button to select among the following
choices:
• English
• Francais (French)
• Espanol (Spanish)
Personalization
Press the option button until PERSONAL PROGRAM
displays. Your vehicle may have personalization
capabilities that allow you to program certain features
to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
Your vehicle may also have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be
programmed to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for
additional information on personal programming.
Compass Zone
To change the compass zone through the DIC, see DIC
Compass (Uplevel Only) on page 3-54.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. To calibrate
the compass through the DIC, see DIC Compass
(Uplevel Only) on page 3-54.
3-53
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through
the DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in Park (P).
Press the option button until COMPASS ZONE
displays.
3-54
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip or fuel button until the vehicle
heading, for example, N for North, is displayed
in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other
industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the option button until COMPASS
CALIBRATION displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATION BEGUN DRIVE
IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION FINISHED
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to COMPASS
CALIBRATION.
3-55
DIC Warnings and Messages
A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
Messages are displayed on the uplevel DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-38.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press any of the uplevel DIC buttons to
acknowledge that you received the message and
clear it from the DIC display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared.
If there are any active warning messages when the
vehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the DIC goes
into a reminder mode. The reminder mode displays any
active message. If there are multiple messages, the DIC
displays each message for five seconds. After each
active message is displayed once, the reminder mode
turns off.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-56
This message comes on while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on. If this message continues
to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer/
retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the
engine.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
If your vehicle has an uplevel DIC, you can monitor
the battery voltage by pressing the gages button until
BATTERY displays.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for
the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen
under the gages menu on the DIC must also be reset.
See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-48 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays and a chime sounds while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-57
CHECK GAS CAP
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message may display if the fuel cap is not on, or is
not fully tightened. The check gas cap light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Check Gas Cap
Light on page 3-47. Check the fuel cap to ensure that it is
on properly. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn this message off. See Filling the
Tank on page 5-8 for more information.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This
message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,
LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire
needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To read the other messages
that may have been sent at the same time, press the
set/reset button. If a tire pressure message appears on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 5-54, Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-48. If the tire
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes
on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-39.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-58
DELAYED LOCKING
This message displays to inform the driver that even
though a door lock switch or the lock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter has been
pressed, that actual locking of the doors is being delayed
because the delayed locking feature has been activated
in the DIC. See “DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for more information.
This message appears and a chime sounds when the
ignition is off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
P (Park). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
P (Park). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-59
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-31 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature
warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light on page 3-38 and Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-38 for more information.
To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the air
conditioner if it is on. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air conditioner can be turned
back on.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message displays when the amount of available
light outside of the vehicle is low, or the windshield
wipers have been on for about 30 seconds, and
the exterior lamps control is off or in the parking lamps
position. This message informs the driver that turning
on the exterior lamps is recommended. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-60
HOOD AJAR
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed properly.
Make sure that the hood is closed completely. See Hood
Release on page 5-11.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-4.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
HOT TRANS (Transmission) FLUID
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle
until it cools down. If the warning message continues to
display, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-61
KEY IN IGNITION
LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays and a chime sounds continuously
when the drivers door is open and the key is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
This message displays when the left rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 5-50.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message disappears and the chiming stops when
the key is removed from the ignition.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
This message displays when the left front turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-62
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message displays when the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible. See Brakes on page 5-37 for
proper fluid level.
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-35.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 3-46 and Filling the Tank on page 5-8 for more
information.
The message displays and a chime sounds while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe engine damage can result from driving a
vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light
on page 3-42.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
This message displays only when the ignition is
in ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when
this message is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen. This message re-displays for a few
seconds if the condition still exists when the engine is
turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-63
LOW WASHER FLUID
PARKING BRAKE ON
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soon
as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the windshield washer
reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-35 for more information.
This message displays to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in ON/RUN,
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Release the parking brake before driving. See Parking
Brake on page 2-29 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
OIL LEVEL LOW ADD OIL
On some vehicles, this message displays when the
vehicle’s engine oil is low. Fill the oil to the proper
level as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for the engine oil fill location.
Also, see Engine Oil on page 5-15 for information on
the kind of oil to use and the proper oil level.
3-64
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-35.
A chime sounds continuously while this message is
displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press any
of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and
to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PARK LAMPS ON
PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays to alert the driver when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on while the ignition
is off and the drivers door is opened. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 for more information. A chime
sounds continuously while this message is displayed.
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed properly. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the front passenger door
is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
P (Park). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
P (Park). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-65
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
This message displays when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency. In this mode, you will notice a significant
loss in power and engine performance. See Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-34 for more
information. Anytime this message is on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-66
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
REMOTE START DISABLED
RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
If your vehicle has the remote start feature,
this message displays if a remote start attempt is
unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the
following conditions are true when a remote start
attempt is made:
This message displays when the right front turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
The key is in the ignition.
The hood or the doors are not closed.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles has been
reached.
This message displays when the right rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 5-50.
• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 and Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2-7 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
3-67
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears on
the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35.
SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
This message displays when the Antilock Brake System
(ABS) is not functioning properly. Have the brake system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
The antilock brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message appears
on the DIC. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light on page 3-36.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-68
This message displays when a problem with the
brake system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE PARK LAMPS
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp fuse is blown
and replace the fuse if necessary. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-99 and Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 5-100 for more information. If changing the fuse
does not correct the problem, see your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays if
there has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak.
A warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
Light on page 3-37. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak System inspected by your dealer/
retailer as soon as possible.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-69
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off
the engine. See PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer
Operation on page 2-19 for more information.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays if a part
on the TPMS is not working properly. The tire pressure
light also flashes and then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-39.
Several conditions may cause this message to appear.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-64 for
more information. If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-70
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
This message displays when the traction system is not
functioning properly. A warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-37. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-7 or Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) on page 4-8 for more information. Have the system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORT
STEERING
If your vehicle has variable effort steering, this message
displays when if this system is not functioning properly.
See Steering on page 4-10 for more information.
Have the system serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-71
STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when StabiliTrak is actively assisting you with directional
control of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may exist
when this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak is not active.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen.
STABILITY CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
any time the system turns off. When this message has
been displayed, StabiliTrak is no longer available to
assist you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-6.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak system to turn off:
• The system is turned off by pressing and holding
the traction control button for five seconds.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak system failure. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
STARTING DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system
or vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
3-72
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
This message displays when the traction system
is on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-8 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the system is no longer active.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared from
the screen.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the traction system turns
off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7
or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-8
for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after two seconds.
Any of the following conditions may cause the system to
turn off:
• The system is turned off by pressing the traction
control button located on the center of the instrument
panel. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-7 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-8.
• The battery is low.
• There is a system failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 2-12.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
P (Park). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-73
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. This message clears from
the DIC if the turn signal is manually turned off, a turn
is completed, or the message is acknowledged.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers. The
customization features include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exterior lighting delay
Interior lighting delay
Delayed locking
Content theft
Remote keyless entry feedback
Remote start
3-74
Your vehicle may also have personalization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to a preferred
setting for up to two drivers. The first personalized key
corresponds to driver 1 and the second personalized key
corresponds to driver 2. The personalization features
include the following:
• Radio station presets
• Auto door unlock preferences
• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences
All of the customization and personalization options
may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization and
personalization features were set when your vehicle
left the factory, but may have been changed from their
default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
The driver’s personalization preferences are recalled by
using the key programmed for driver 1 or 2.
To change customization and personalization
preferences, use the following procedure:
Customization Menu Items
Entering the Personal Program Menu
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
FACTORY DEFAULTS
2. Press the option button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), PERSONAL
PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.
If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal
program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM NOT
AVAILABLE will display.
Press the option button until FACTORY DEFAULTS
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
3. Press the set/reset button to begin.
4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen.
Press the option button to display the features
that are available to program.
Press the set/reset button to change the setting of
each feature.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
and personalization features back to their factory default
settings.
NO (default): The customization and personalization
features will not be set to their factory default settings.
YES: The customization and personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-75
ALL KEYS WILL BE RESET
This screen will only display if YES was selected on the
FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following
settings:
60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
60 seconds.
90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
90 seconds.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to their
factory default settings and the DIC will return to the
PERSONAL PROGRAM menu.
INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED
OK: The features will be set to their factory default
settings, the DIC will exit the personal program menu,
and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will display.
This feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY
Press the option button until INT LIGHTS KEYS
REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following settings:
This feature allows you to set the amount of time the
exterior lamps remain on after the key is removed from
the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not
cause the interior lamps to turn on.
Press the option button until EXT LIGHT DELAY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
15 seconds.
30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
3-76
DELAYED LOCKING
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all of the doors have been closed for
about five seconds.
When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it may be
activated when the key is out of the ignition by doing
one of the following:
• Pressing the driver door power lock switch one time
while the driver door is open.
• Pressing the passenger door power lock switch one
time while the passenger door is open.
• Pressing the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter one time while any door
is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is
active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating one
of the above actions more than one time.
If a door remains open, without any other door being
opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after about
45 seconds.
If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock the
doors. See Delayed Locking on page 2-10 for more
information.
Press the option button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be
delayed by five seconds while a door is open after a
power door lock switch is pressed, or the lock button on
the RKE transmitter is pressed while a door is open.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-77
CONTENT THEFT
FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
once this feature is turned on, the system will activate
if someone tries to enter the vehicle without using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
correct key.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the option button until CONTENT THEFT appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned off.
ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned on.
When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will be armed when the vehicle is locked by pressing
the lock button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the
power door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-17 and Power Door Locks on page 2-9
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-78
Press the option button until FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the
vehicle.
LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
Personalization Menu Items
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
the remote start to be turned off or on. The remote start
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7
for more information.
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program setting for up to two drivers:
Press the option button until REMOTE START appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
PERSONALIZE KEY
This feature allows you to personalize a key to be
recognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you
to program personalization features to a preferred setting
to correspond to key 1 or 2. If you are using a key that
has already been personalized, this screen will not
display.
Press the option button until PERSONALIZE KEY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
NO (default): The key will not be personalized.
YES: The key will be personalized.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-79
REPLACE KEY
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This screen displays only if YES was selected for the
PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2 have already
been personalized, and the current key being used is
not key 1 or 2. This feature allows you to program a key
to be recognized as key 1 or 2 in the event that the
previously programmed key needs to be replaced.
This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be
turned off, used for the driver door only, or for all of
the doors.
1: The key will be programmed to be recognized as
key 1.
OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park) or the key is taken out of the ignition.
2: The key will be programmed to be recognized as
key 2.
DRIVER: Only the driver door will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park) or the key is taken out
of the ignition.
CANCEL (default): The key will not be programmed.
RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED
This screen displays only if YES was selected for the
PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature allows you
to set the radio station presets to be recognized for the
key, 1 or 2, that is being used. You may notice a change
to the radio after this message displays. After this
message displays, any change to the presets will be
recognized for key 1 or 2 and will be maintained by
the radio.
3-80
Press the option button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park) or the key is taken out
of the ignition.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO UNLOCK ON
This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was
selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.
This feature allows the selection of when the vehicle’s
doors will unlock.
Press the option button until AUTO UNLOCK ON
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
taken out of the ignition.
PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press the option button until FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST
PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following settings:
DRIVER (default): The driver door will unlock on the
first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the option button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. The DIC
will then display PRESS UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY
FOB. Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
and the setting will be saved for that RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
After programming the last option, the message
PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED appears on the DIC
display for a few seconds, then the display returns to
the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.
FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS
Exiting the Personal Program Menu
This feature allows the selection of which doors will
unlock on the first press of the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for
more information.
The personal program menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The end of the personal program menu is reached.
3-81
Audio System(s)
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
3-82
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more information.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM
displays. Press and hold M until the correct minute
displays. The clock can be set with the ignition on or off.
Radio(s)
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with CD similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
3-83
Playing the Radio
P (Power):
Press to turn the system on and off.
v (Volume): Turn to increase or to decrease the
volume.
DISP (Display): Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and time of day. While
the ignition is off, press this button to display the time.
If the vehicle’s radio has XM™, press the DISP
button while in XM mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current song
or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until the desired display appears, then hold DISP
for two seconds. The radio beeps once and the selected
display becomes the default.
3-84
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume): If the vehicle’s
radio has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV), the audio
system adjusts automatically to make up for road and
wind noise while driving.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Depending on the
radio, the selection may be SPEED VOL MIN (volume
minimum), SPEED VOL MED (volume medium), or
SPEED VOL MAX (volume maximum). Each higher
setting allows for more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. Then while driving, SCV increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same while
driving. NONE displays if the radio cannot determine the
vehicle speed. To turn SCV off, press SCV until OFF or
SPEED VOL OFF displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
e (Tune):
Turn to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press and release to go to the previous or
the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN or SCN displays and the radio
beeps once. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few
seconds, and then goes to the next station. Press either
arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCAN or PSC displays and the
radio beeps twice. The radio goes to a preset station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
SCAN: On the radio with six-disc CD, press until
SC displays. The radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, and then goes to the next station.
Press again to stop scanning stations.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
INFO (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service Only):
The vehicle’s radio may have an INFO button. If the
current station on the radio has a message, the
information symbol displays. Press to see the message.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To manually
scroll through the message, press and release the
INFO button.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO displays.
3-85
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM, six XM1
and six XM2) can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons.
e (Bass/Treble): Press and release until BASS or
TREBLE displays. Turn e to increase or to decrease
the bass or treble.
To program either radio:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1™ or
XM2™ (if equipped).
3. Tune to the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until the radio beeps once. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed again, the
station and equalization that were stored, returns.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-86
Press and hold e to adjust the bass and treble to the
middle position. The radio beeps once.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold e when no tone or speaker
control displays. ALL CENTERED displays and the
radio beeps once.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select customized
equalization settings.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press and release until BASS or TREBLE displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release until
BAL (balance) displays. Turn e to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release e until FAD (fade)
displays. Turn e to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, press, then press and hold e until the radio
beeps once.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold e when no tone or speaker
control displays. ALL CENTERED displays and the
radio beeps once.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category:
1. Press the CAT button to enter the category select
mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the
e knob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to go to the category’s first station.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again to go to another
station within that category. The category will
display. If CAT times out and is no longer on
the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit the category select mode or wait
for CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last station
that was being listened to.
3-87
Scanning Categories (CAT)
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
LOCKED: If LOCKED displays, it means the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
To scan a desired category:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
1. Press the CAT button to enter the category select
mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the
e knob to select a category.
3. Press either SEEK arrow for two seconds once the
desired category is displayed, to scan the stations
in that category.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last
station that was being listened to.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated
for the vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE displays, it
means that the radio has not been configured properly for
the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer
for service.
3-88
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-98 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD begins playing. To insert a
CD while the ignition is off, first press the Z button
or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in
the player, it stays in the player. While the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:
LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the indicator light,
located to the right of the slot, begins to flash
and MULTI LOAD # displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the CD
partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls
the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light begins
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green, another CD can be loaded. The CD player takes
up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, press the
LOAD button to cancel the loading function. The radio
begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
3-89
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play a
specific CD, press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar appears under
the CD number that is playing and the track number
displays.
Z (Eject):
Press to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release.
To eject multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the
Z button for two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the indicator light,
located to the right of the slot, begins to flash
and EJECT ALL displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #
displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light begins
flashing again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or
the Z button.
3-90
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD is
automatically pulled back into the player. If a CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player senses an error and
tries to eject the CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the Z button to eject a CD
after trying to push it in manually. The player’s 25-second
eject timer resets at each press of the eject button,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25-second
time period has elapsed.
1 s (Reverse): Press to reverse within the current
track.
2 \ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward within the
current track.
3 N (Repeat): Depending on the radio, press to
hear a track over again. REPEAT TRACK displays.
The current track continues to repeat.
For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to repeat
one track or an entire CD.
To use repeat:
• To repeat playing a track, press and release this
button. RPT # displays. Press this button again
to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat playing a CD, press and hold this button
for two seconds. REPEAT CD # displays. Press
this button again to turn off repeat play.
4 RDM (Random): Depending on the radio, press
to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM ON displays. Press again to turn off
random play.
For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to listen to
the tracks in random, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random on a Six-Disc CD player:
• To play the tracks on a CD in random order, press
and release the random button. RANDOM ONE
displays. Press again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for more
than two seconds. A beep sounds and RANDOM
ALL displays. Press again to turn off random play.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right arrow
to go to the start of the next track.
To scan tracks, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN displays. The radio goes to the
next track, plays 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.
To scan one CD on a Six-Disc CD player, press and
hold either SEEK arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radio
goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes
to the next track.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press to see how long the current track
has been playing. The elapsed time of the track displays.
To change the default on the display, track, or elapsed
time, press until the desired display appears, then hold
the button for two seconds. The radio produces one beep
and the selected display becomes the default.
3-91
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD: Press to play a CD while listening to the radio.
The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select an equalization
setting while playing a CD. The equalization is set while
a CD is played. See “EQ” listed previously for more
information. If an EQ setting is selected for a CD,
it is activated each time a CD is played.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject is activated
while either the ignition or radio is off. CDs can
be loaded while the ignition and radio is off if this
button is pressed first.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
The vehicle’s radio may have the MP3 CD-R disc
capability feature. For more information, see Using
an MP3 on page 3-95 later in this section.
Using List Mode
The Six-Disc CD player has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD” listed previously in this section for
more information.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song list
mode. LIST should not display. If LIST is displayed,
press the LIST button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the p arrow to locate
the track to be saved. The track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the LIST button to save the track
into memory. When LIST is pressed, one beep
sounds immediately. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the LIST button, TRACK
ADD displays and two beeps sound to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections
are saved.
3-92
To play the song list, press the LIST button. One beep
sounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded tracks
begins to play in the order they were saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track returns to the first
saved track.
To delete the entire song list:
To delete tracks from the song list:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on.
LIST displays.
3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired track
to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the LIST button for two seconds.
When LIST is pressed, one beep sounds
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the LIST button, TRACK DELETE displays
and the radio beeps twice to confirm that the track
has been deleted.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on.
LIST displays.
3. Press and hold the LIST button for more than
four seconds. The radio beeps once, followed
by two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
sounds after four seconds. LIST EMPTY displays
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the LIST button. The radio
beeps once and LIST is removed from the display.
3-93
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
Depending on the radio, see “MP3 Format”
later in this section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-94
Care of CDs
CD sound quality can be reduced due to CD quality,
the method of recording, the quality of the music that has
been recorded, and the way the CD has been handled.
Handle them carefully. Store CD(s) in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or
not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
If you burn an MP3 disc on a personal computer:
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
3-95
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names could
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve disc space, keep the length of the file, folder, or
playlist name brief. MP3 CDs do not require file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth. The
depth of the folders should be kept down to make it easier
while locating a folder during playback. All items over the
maximum are ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) always are accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
does not display.
3-96
No Folder
If a CD has no folder, only compressed files or playlists
are located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions have no function on a CD that
is recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have played,
play continues from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display.
See “DISP” later in this section for more information.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of words
on the last page of text, and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, there is no editing capability.
These playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING DISC displays.
The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol
displays. See “Playing a CD” earlier in this section.
3 N (Repeat): Repeat lets one track, the entire folder,
or playlist be repeated.
Press and release this button until REPEAT TRACK,
REPEAT FOLDER, or REPEAT P-LIST displays.
The current track, folder or playlist continues to repeat.
Press and release this button until REPEAT OFF displays
to turn off repeated play.
4 RDM (Random): Press to hear tracks in random,
rather than sequential order. The entire folder, playlist,
or CD can be played in random order.
Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOM
FOLDER, RANDOM P-LIST (playlist), or RANDOM
DISC displays. Once all of the tracks in the current folder
or playlist have played, the system moves on to the
next folder or playlist, and plays all of the tracks
in random order.
While in random, pressing and releasing o or p SEEK
arrow takes you to the previous or to the next random
track.
Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOM OFF
displays, to turn off random play.
5 ! (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track in
the previous folder. Press this button while in random
folder mode to go to the previous folder and randomly
play the tracks in that folder.
6 # (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in the
next folder. Press this button while in random folder
mode to go to the next folder and randomly play
the tracks in that folder.
3-97
DISP (Display): Press to change between track mode,
folder/playlist mode, and ID3 tag. The display shows
only eight characters, but there can be up to four pages
of text. If there are more than eight characters in the
song, folder, or playlist name, pressing this knob within
two seconds goes to the next page of text. If there
are no other pages to be shown, pressing this button
within two seconds goes to the next display mode.
• Song name and time of day mode displays
the current song name and time of day.
• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number the track number and the elapsed
time of the track.
• Song name and track number mode displays the
current song name and track number.
• ID3 Tag and folder mode displays the ID3 tag
information and the folder number.
• Song and folder mode displays the number of
songs in the folder and the folder number.
INFO (Information): INFO displays when a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
3-98
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These
channels, or any others, can be blocked by
calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process should
take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
CH Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Locked: The XM receiver in the vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information
on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and
natural voice.
3-99
Audio System
Pairing
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide
for more information.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-110 for more
information.
b > (Push To Talk):
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
c x (Phone On Hook):
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
with the first available paired cell phone in the order
the phone was paired.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-100
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle,
the system will say “Is connected” after the
connected phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.
Use a name that best describes the phone. This
name will be used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system then confirms the name
provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-101
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-102
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
3-103
Deleting Name Tags
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let’s try again,
please say the name tag.”
3-104
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by
the system, say “Verify” at any time and
the system will repeat them.
3-105
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-106
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b > and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press
• Press b > to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• Press b > again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
To Mute a call
1. Press b > . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
1. While on a call press b > . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b > . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b > to link all
3-107
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press b > . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b > for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
1. Press and hold b > for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
3-108
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b > . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b > . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3-109
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
3-110
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold w for two seconds
until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, play
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press w again to stop scanning.
While a CD is playing, press w to go to the next track.
x (Previous):
Press to go to the previous radio
station. The radio seeks stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold c x for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes
to a station, play for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press c x again to stop scanning.
While a CD is playing, press c x to go to the previous
track.
c (Phone on Hook): Press to reject an incoming call,
or end a current call.
b > (Push to Talk/Mute): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again or any other radio button,
to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b > for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-39
and Bluetooth® on page 3-99 in this manual for more
information.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press to play stations
that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio seeks preset stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
+ x / − x (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the volume.
3-111
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur, especially around
tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
3-112
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off.
The volume level will change from the normal level to
loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display. To
change back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level will change
from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
3-113
✍ NOTES
3-114
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-7
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-20
Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-20
Towing ..........................................................4-26
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-26
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-26
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental reasons
for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-7, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-8, and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
4-4
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If
the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 3-36.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
4-5
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on
the intended path.
When the system activates, STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE comes on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
4-6
The Traction Control
warning light comes on the
instrument panel cluster
when a problem is
detected with StabiliTrak.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM or STABILITY
CONTROL OFF message will be displayed on the DIC.
When this message is displayed, the system is not
operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control automatically disengages. The
cruise control can be reengaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
Traction Control System (TCS)
For vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, StabiliTrak can be
turned off by pressing and holding the traction control
button, located above the radio, for approximately
five seconds. A STABILITY CONTROL OFF message
will be displayed on the DIC when StabiliTrak is
turned off. StabiliTrak will remain off until the traction
control button is pressed once to turn it back on, or until
the engine is restarted.
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin. It may also upshift
the transmission to limit wheel spin. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will be displayed
when the system is limiting wheel spin.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the transmission only as high
as the shift lever position that was chosen, so use the
lower gears only when necessary. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-26.
4-7
This light, along with the
TRACTION CONTROL
OFF message, will display
briefly on the DIC when
TCS is not on.
If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in the
DIC. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, TCS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed. TCS should be
turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-20 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-19.
To turn TCS on or off, press the TCS button located
above the radio.
4-8
When TCS is turned off, the TCS warning light will
come on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message on the DIC. It will turn off when TCS is turned
back on. If TCS is limiting wheel spin when the TCS
button is pressed, the TCS warning light will come
on and TCS will turn off right away.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if
it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will be displayed
when the system is limiting wheel spin.
If cruise control is being used when ETS begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be reengaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for
more information.
ETS operates in all transmission shift lever positions. But
the system can upshift the transmission only as high as
the chosen shift lever position, so use the lower gears
only when necessary. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-26 for more information.
This warning light, along
with the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message,
will display briefly on the
DIC when ETS is not on.
If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in the
DIC. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, ETS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed. ETS should be
turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-19.
To turn ETS on or off,
press the Traction Control
button located above
the radio.
When ETS is turned off, the ETS warning light will come
on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFF message
on the DIC. It will turn off when ETS is turned back on. If
ETS is limiting wheel spin when the traction control button
is pressed, the ETS warning light comes on and ETS will
turn off right away.
4-9
Steering
Steering in Emergencies
Power Steering
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-10
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to
13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
4-14
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
4-16
{ CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-7 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-8, it improves the ability to accelerate on slippery
roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn
off the traction system to help maintain vehicle motion
at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-17
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. To
get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
CAUTION:
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
•
{ CAUTION:
•
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
CAUTION:
4-18
(Continued)
(Continued)
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-20.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-75.
4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. Shift back and forth between
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-26.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.
4-20
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
lists the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and
all nonfactory-installed options.
4-21
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-22
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-28 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-23
and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity
weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight
4-24
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. These could cause
you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-25
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-26
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-15.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle can be towed with its front wheels on a
dolly. To tow the vehicle using a dolly:
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,
a dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
4-27
6. Remove the key from the ignition.
7. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the dolly.
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
4-28
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the driver and the
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are
all important. It can depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight
the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for
more information.
4-29
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-30
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are,
then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch
is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
water, and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-33 in the Index for more
information.
Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
4-31
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-32
Backing Up
Making Turns
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-31.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-33
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-34
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-31.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements .............................................5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle .................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22
Cooling System ............................................5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-31
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-31
Engine Overheating .......................................5-31
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-34
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-34
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-35
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-46
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-50
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Replacement .................................5-53
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-61
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-64
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-67
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-68
Buying New Tires .........................................5-69
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-78
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Base Model) ...................................5-84
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Super Only) ....................................5-87
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-89
Appearance Care ............................................5-90
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-90
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-91
Leather .......................................................5-92
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-92
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93
5-2
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94
Finish Care ..................................................5-94
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-95
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim .......................................5-96
Tires ...........................................................5-97
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-97
Finish Damage .............................................5-97
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-98
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-98
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98
Electrical System ............................................5-99
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-99
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-99
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-99
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-100
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-101
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-106
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-106
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-67.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-16.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-98.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
5-5
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If the vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VIN Code 2),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7
for additional information.
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
5-6
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-40. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-40.
The vehicle may also have a check gas cap warning
light, which displays on the instrument panel cluster
if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See Check
Gas Cap Light on page 3-47 for more information.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel
cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left of the
steering column below
the instrument panel.
2. Push the secondary hood release lever, located
under the center of the hood above the grille, up
and to the right to disengage it.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure all the filler caps
are properly secured. Pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, this is what you will see:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
B. Battery on page 5-40.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41.
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.
E. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-101.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-24.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap on page 5-31.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-34.
I. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling System
on page 5-24.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick.
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
M. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System on
page 5-24.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
B. Battery on page 5-40.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-101.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41.
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.
F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-31.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-34.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick.
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
M. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-24.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
3.8L V6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-106.
5-16
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
5-17
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light or, if the vehicle has the Driver
Information Center (DIC), a CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on. See Change Engine Oil Light on
page 3-43 or DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil light
or CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset
the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
• Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC)
1. Press the option button on the DIC until
ENGINE OIL MONITOR appears on the
DIC screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.
The next screen indicates that the CHANGE
OIL SOON message has been reset.
If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC, when the
gages button is pressed and the OIL LIFE
REMAINING mode appears, it should read
100 percent OIL LIFE REMAINING.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
• Vehicles without Driver Information Center (DIC)
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to
ON/RUN.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the
vehicle.
If the light or message comes back on when the vehicle
is started, the oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-20
3.8L V6 Engine shown
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through
the slots on the housing. If your vehicle has one
of the V6 engines, a notch on the sides of the filter
cover will indicate the correct engagement.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.
{ CAUTION:
5.3L V8 Engine
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on
the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear, pausing for about
three seconds in each one. Then, position the shift
lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
5-22
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle has this
symbol on it, and is located
near the rear of the
engine compartment.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on
the dipstick.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
crosshatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-23
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
5.3L V8 Engine
3.8L V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-24
A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there
is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-31.
5-25
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing
else needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
outside temperature.
engine temperature.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.
5-26
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
The coolant recovery tank
is located in the engine
compartment toward the
rear of the engine on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL line or a little higher. The COLD FILL line
is near the bottom of the recovery tank and has an arrow
pointing down at it.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 5.3L engine
the coolant recovery tank is located in the engine
compartment toward the rear of the engine on the driver
side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-27
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (3.8L V6 Engine)
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-28
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
3. Open the coolant air
bleed valve located
on the thermostat
housing, near the
upper radiator hose.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
Engine Compartment Overview for more information
on location.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 Engine Coolant for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from the
air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valve after the radiator is filled.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL line.
7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
8. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
10. Then replace the radiator pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level
in the coolant recovery tank should be at the
COLD FILL line when the engine is cold.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (5.3L V8 Engine)
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose is no longer
hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant for more information about the
proper coolant mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5-30
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL line.
6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap. After a day or two of driving, when the
engine is cold, check the coolant level in the recovery
tank. If it is low, refill it to the COLD FILL line.
If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealer/retailer service department
inspect the vehicle for leaks.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning
light on the instrument panel cluster that indicate an
overheated engine condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-38 and Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-38 for more
information.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), you will find an ENGINE
COOLANT HOT and a REDUCED POWER STOP
WHEN SAFE message displayed on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-31
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-34 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-34 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-32
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see ″Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode″
later in this section.
5-33
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN
SAFE message will come on in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), if the vehicle has one, along with the engine
coolant temperature warning light on the instrument
panel, to indicate the vehicle has entered overheated
engine protection operating mode. The temperature
gage will also indicate an overheat condition exists.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine or the
5.3L V8 engine, the fluid level should be between
the ADD and HOT marks when the engine is cold,
and at the HOT mark when the engine is hot. If the
fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine is cold or
hot, power steering fluid should be added.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
5-35
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid is low, a low washer
fluid light may appear on the instrument panel cluster.
See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on page 3-45
for more information.
In addition, if your vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC), the LOW WASHER FLUID message will
display when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-36
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-35.
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-37
What to Add
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-38
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{ CAUTION:
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-40
If the battery has a very low charge or is dead, it might
not be possible to remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting
Out of Park on page 2-32.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-41 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the transmission
in P (Park) before setting the parking brake.
5-41
If your vehicle has a
V6 engine, to uncover
the remote positive (+)
terminal, press the tab at
the bottom of the fuse block
and lift the cover up.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jump
starting. It has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal, located on the underhood fuse block,
for that purpose. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information
on location.
5-42
3.8L V6 Engine
Always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) terminal on the battery.
5. If your vehicle has the
5.3L V8 engine, to
uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the fuse
block cover.
{ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
{ CAUTION:
5.3L Engine
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-43
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Attach the
negative cable to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part, other than the ECM, ECM bracket or cables
attached to the ECM bracket.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-44
3.8L V6 Engine
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (–) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5.3L Engine
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should be:
• Placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a
light colored wall.
• On a perfectly level surface which is level all the
way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is at a right angle to the wall.
• Clear of any snow, ice or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled, with the tires properly inflated
and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming
is being done.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel, with the
spare tire in its proper location, and one person or
160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
male hex.
Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws under
the hood near the headlamps.
5-47
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
4. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 4.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
5. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directly
on the headlamp. This allows only the beam of
light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen
on the flat surface.
6. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
male hex.
7. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
3. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5-48
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
8. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows
the incorrect headlamp aim.
9. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
4. Pull back the trunk trim.
To replace a taillamp, turn signal, sidemarker, stoplamp
or back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Remove the convenience net.
5. Turn the two wing nuts counterclockwise and
remove them.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect the
wiring harness.
3. Turn the four plastic wing nuts retaining the trunk
trim counterclockwise. There are two wing nuts
located on the driver side (shown) and two located
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
5-50
12. Push the taillamp assembly back into place on the
vehicle.
13. Turn the two wing nuts clockwise to reinstall them.
14. Place the trunk trim to its original location.
A. Taillamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. Taillamp
E. Back-up Lamp
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
9. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.
15. Turn the four plastic wing nuts clockwise to reinstall
them back into their original location.
11. Reconnect the wiring harness.
16. Return the convenience net to its original location.
5-51
License Plate Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turn the
socket clockwise.
1. Remove the screws for either of the license
plate lamps.
5. Turn and push the license plate lamp back through
the fascia opening.
6. Reinstall the screws for the license plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
921
Rear Sidemarker, License Plate
Lamp, and Taillamp
194
Stoplamps and Taillamps
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-52
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced
be sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will
continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield
can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. Here is how to remove the wiper blade:
2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove
it from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip into place.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information
refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20.
CAUTION:
5-54
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your vehicle’s tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
5-55
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-76.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph
(105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for
emergency use when a regular road tire has lost
5-56
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-58
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61
and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
5-59
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-68.
5-60
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-20. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information regarding the compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89.
5-61
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
5-62
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-64 for
additional information.
5-63
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
If your vehicle has the uplevel Driver Information
Center (DIC), a warning message to check the pressure
in a specific tire displays at the same time the low tire
pressure warning light comes on. The low tire pressure
warning light and the DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. Vehicles that have the uplevel DIC
5-64
buttons can also check tire pressure levels by pressing
the gages button. For additional information and details
about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-48 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-67 and Tires on page 5-54.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. If your vehicle has the
uplevel Driver Information Center (DIC), A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The TPMS malfunction light should
go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-69.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction light comes on
and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The TPMS malfunction
light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See “TPMS
Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.
5-65
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process
stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the
TPMS sensor matching process can begin.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, the horn chirps two more times to
signal the tire learning process has ended. Turn
the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading
information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-66
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-68
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-68 and Wheel
Replacement on page 5-74.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-61 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
5-67
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-64.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-76.
5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers
over a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See
Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-55 for additional
information.
5-69
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a
full set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-67 for information on
proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for use
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-89.
5-70
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for
more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-69 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
5-72
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-74
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your
vehicle, and do not spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
5-76
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the compact spare tire.
5-78
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You vehicle may have wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
If so, go to the Removing the Wheel Nuts section. If the
vehicle has steel wheel covers with plastic nut caps, the
wheel nuts are hidden behind the cap. To remove the
wheel cover:
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the plastic wheel nut caps.
If needed, finish loosening them by hand. The nut
caps will not come off of the wheel cover.
The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so do
not try to remove the cover with your bare hands.
Do not drop the cap or lay it face down, as it could
become scratched or damaged.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Once you have removed the wheel cover or plastic nut
caps, use the following procedure to remove the flat
tire and install the spare tire.
5-79
Removing the Wheel Nuts
1. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts, but do no remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack
lift head.
5-80
3. Find the jacking location using the diagram above
and corresponding triangular-shaped hoisting
notches located on the underside of the vehicle’s
plastic molding.
The front location is about 6.5 inches (16.5 cm)
from the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 9 inches (22.8 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-81
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Turn each nut clockwise
by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
8. Install the compact spare tire.
5-82
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to come loose and even come off.
This could lead to a crash. If you have to replace
them, be sure to get new original equipment wheel
nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and
have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-106 for wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-106 for the wheel nut torque specification.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare
could be damaged.
5-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Base Model)
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with
the extension protector, located in the foam holder,
to help avoid wheel surface damage.
5-84
To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely.
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89. Use this as
a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Cover
Retainer
Compact Spare Tire
Wing Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Extension Protector
Foam Holder
Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
5-85
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Full-Size Flat Tire
5-86
Retainer
Full-Size Flat Tire
Protective Guide
Extension Bolt Screw
Wing Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Foam Holder
Bolt Screw
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Super Only)
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely.
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
{ CAUTION:
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put
the protector back in the foam holder. When storing
the compact spare tire, the tire must be stored valve
stem down.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89. Use this as
a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
protector, located in the foam holder, to help avoid
wheel surface damage.
To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.
Compact Spare Tire
5-87
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Full-Size Flat Tire
5-88
Retainer
Full-Size Flat Tire
Protective Guide
Extension Bolt Screw
Wing Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Foam Holder
Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired
or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
5-89
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
5-90
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-91
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5-92
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
5-93
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-93.
5-94
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-95
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such
as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
5-96
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired
or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-97
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-106 for your vehicle’s engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is in the trunk. It is very helpful if you ever
need to order parts. The label has the following
information:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
5-98
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and in the fuse block wiring itself. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Make sure
a bad fuse is replaced with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located on the
passenger side of the
instrument panel. Pull off
the cover labeled FUSES
to expose the fuse block.
Fuses
CHMSL/BKUP
5-100
Usage
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamp
CLSTR
Cluster
CNSTR
Canister Vent
CRUISE
Cruise Control
Fuses
Usage
DR/LCK
TRUNK
Door Locks, Trunk
HAZRD
Turn Signal, Hazard
Heated Mirrors
HTD/SEAT
Heated Seats
INT/ILLUM
Climate Control System
Interior Lamps
ONSTAR/ALDL OnStar®, Data Link
PRK/LAMP
RFA/MOD
S/ROOF
HTD/MIR
HVAC
Fuses
Park Lamps
Usage
Remote Keyless Entry
Sunroof
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Controls Illumination
Relays
Usage
RAP
Retained Accessory Power
PRK/LAMP
Park Lamp Relay
R/DEFOG
Rear Defogger Relay
Ignition Key Lock
Underhood Fuse Block
PWR/MIR
Power Mirrors
PWR/SEAT
Power Seats
Some fuses and relays are located in the underhood
fuse block on the passenger side of the vehicle in
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
PRK/SWTCH
PWR/WNDW
Power Window
RDO/AMP
Radio, Amplifier
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-101
Mini-Fuses
3.8L V6 Engines
Mini-Fuses
5-102
Usage
Usage
6
Washer/Regulated Voltage Control
7
Fog Lamps
8
Transmission Control Module
9
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
10
Auxiliary Power
11
Horn
12
Emission
13
Air Conditioner Clutch
14
Oxygen Sensor
15
Powertrain Control Module
16
Powertrain Control Module,
Electronic Throttle Control
17
Electronic Throttle Control
18
Display
19
Antilock Brake Solenoid
1
Driver Side High-Beam
20
Fuel Injector
2
Passenger Side High-Beam
21
Transmission Solenoid
3
Driver Side Low-Beam
22
Fuel Pump
4
Passenger Side Low-Beam
23
Antilock Brake System
5
Windshield Wiper
24
Ignition
J-Style Fuses
Usage
Micro-Relays
Usage
25
Air Pump
39
Horn
26
Battery Main 1
40
Powertrain
27
Battery Main 2
41
Fuel Pump
28
Battery Main 3
29
Fan 1
30
Battery Main 4
31
Antilock Brake System Motor
32
Fan 2
33
Starter
Micro-Relays
Mini-Relays
Usage
34
Headlamp High-Beam
35
Headlamp Driver Module
36
Fog Lamp
37
Ignition 1
38
Air Conditioning Compressor
Usage
42
Fan 1
43
Fan 3
44
Windshield Wiper High
45
Windshield Wiper
46
Fan 2
48
Crank
Fuse Puller
55
Diodes
§
Usage
Fuse Puller
Usage
Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
Diode
5-103
Fuses
5.3L V8 Engine
Fuses
Usage
Usage
BATT 1
Battery 1
BATT 2
Battery 2
BATT 3
Battery 3
BATT 4
Battery 4
COMPASS
Compass
ECM IGN
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Ignition
ECM/TCM
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
EMISSIONS1
Emissions 1
EMISSIONS 2
Emissions 2
ETC/ECM
Electronic Throttle Control, ECM
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
FAN 1
Cooling Fan 1
ABS
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 2
ABS MTR
ABS Motor
FOGLAMPS
Fog Lamps
ABS SOL
ABS Solenoid
FUEL/PUMP
Fuel Pump
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
Airbag, Display
HORN
Horn
AUX PWR
Auxiliary Power
HVAC
Climate Control System
5-104
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
INJ 1
Injectors 1
A/C CMPRSR
INJ 2
Injectors 2
FAN 1
Cooling Fan 1
LT HI BEAM
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamps
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 2
LT LO BEAM
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
FAN 3
Cooling Fan 3
RT HI BEAM
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
FUEL/PUMP
RT LO BEAM
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
PWR/TRN
STRTR
Starter
TRANS
Transmission
WPR
WSW/RVC1
HDM
STRTR
Air Conditioning Compressor
Fuel Pump
Headlamp Driver Module
Powertrain
Starter
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washers, Regulated
Voltage Control
5-105
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.8L V6 Engine
11.2 qt
10.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine
13.3 qt
12.6 L
3.8L V6 Engine
4.5 qt
4.3 L
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
3.8L V6 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
17.0 gal
64.4 L
3.8L V6 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
17.5 gal
66.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5-106
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application
5.3L V8 Engine
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
English
Metric
17.5 gal
66.2 L
7.4 qt
7.0 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.8L V6 Engine
Engine
2
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
5.3 V8 Engine with Active Fuel
Management™
C
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-107
✍ NOTES
5-108
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance
is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the
level of emissions from the vehicle. To help protect
the environment, and to keep the vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-6.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer do
these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE OIL
SOON DIC message displays, service is required for
the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-18 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the light or message appears, certain services,
checks, and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that the
first service be Maintenance I, the second service be
Maintenance II, and then alternate Maintenance I
and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light or
message displays within 10 months since the vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light or message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
light or message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-67 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure
test of the cooling system and pressure cap and
cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning
condenser is recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-53 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-95 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-68.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors, hood,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment, glove box door, and console door.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance.
Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks
and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
®
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-25.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-11
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM
Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
6-12
Usage
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.8L V6 Engines
15221217
A1614C
5.3L V8 Engine
10350737
A2962C
3.8L V6 Engine
25010792
PF47
5.3L V8 Engines
89017524
PF48
15284938
CF132
3.8L V6 Engine
12568387
41-101
5.3L V8 Engine
12609877
41-985
Driver Side
15941735
—
Passenger Side
15941736
—
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades – 22.0 in (55.0 cm)
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L V8 Engine
3.8L V6 Engine
6-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-15
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17
OnStar® ......................................................7-18
Navigation System ........................................7-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-18
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your GM dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel.
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, in the United States, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, you can file with the BBB Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps one and
two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you
to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review of
the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address. Your inquiry should be accompanied
by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/buick
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find Buick dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Buick − www.buick.com
Buick Merchandise — www.buickmerchandise.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.buick.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Buick, the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
www.Buick.com
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
7-6
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-252-1112;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-7
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Buick and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
7-8
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Buick dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change
a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if
equipped, must be in good condition and properly
inflated. It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair
or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by
the warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during
the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance
advisor will help you make arrangements and
explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a six request limit per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
7-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-11
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
7-12
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
7-13
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-14
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-16
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-17
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-39 in this
manual for more information.
7-18
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-67
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-99
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-21, 3-25
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-34
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33
Airbag System ................................................ 1-53
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-67
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-58
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-56
Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-113
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-113
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-36
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-96
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-97
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-90
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-97
Tires .......................................................... 5-97
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-21
Audio System ................................................. 3-82
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-110
Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-113
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-113
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-112
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-82
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-110
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-113
1
Audio System(s) .............................................
Automatic Door Lock .......................................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-83
2-10
5-22
2-26
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-69
B
C
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 3-113
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-15
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-99
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-37
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
System Warning Light .................................. 3-35
Braking ........................................................... 4-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-46
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-52
Calibration ..................................................... 3-54
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-106
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-12, 2-33, 4-17
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-95
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-47
Center Seat ..................................................... 1-7
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-75
Charging System Light .................................... 3-35
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-40
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-47
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
2
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-97
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41
Older Children ............................................. 1-29
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-50
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-113
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-96
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-94
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92
Interior ....................................................... 5-90
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Tires .......................................................... 5-97
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Climate Control System ................................... 3-21
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-29
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-25
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-82
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-89
Compass ....................................................... 3-54
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-48
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 5-25
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-38
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-38
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-39
Cooling System .............................................. 5-24
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-16
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-43
Cupholders .................................................... 2-47
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-15
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................... 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-17
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-17
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
DIC Compass ................................................. 3-54
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-95
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-45
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
4
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-47
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-48
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-74
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-13
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-20
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-25
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-17
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-100
Power Windows and Other Power
Options ................................................... 5-99
Electrical System (cont.)
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-99
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-18
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-19
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-43
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-40
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-38
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-38
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-34
Overheating ................................................ 5-31
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-44
Starting ...................................................... 2-23
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-8
Warning Light ............................................. 3-37
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
7-17
1-29
3-13
3-15
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-97
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-76
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire, Storing ..................................... 5-84, 5-87
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-34
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-35
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-7
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-47
Driving for Better Economy ............................. 4-2
5
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-46
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-47
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-100
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-101
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-99
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-38
Fuel .......................................................... 3-46
Speedometer .............................................. 3-32
Tachometer ................................................. 3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-43
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-6
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-47
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-46
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-99
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System .................................... 3-14
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Suggested Light .......................................... 3-44
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-21
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-24
Heater ........................................................... 3-25
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-44
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-61
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-31
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-16
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Lamps
Courtesy ....................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Overhead Console Reading ..........................
Rear Assist Handle Reading ..........................
5-55
3-40
3-16
3-15
3-18
3-18
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System for Child Restraints ...................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............
Brake System Warning .................................
Change Engine Oil ......................................
Charging System .........................................
Check Gas Cap ..........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Door Ajar ...................................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light ..........................................
Headlamps Suggested .................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Low Coolant Warning ...................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Low Washer Fluid Warning ...........................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Reduced Engine Power ................................
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................
Security .....................................................
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
1-28
1-22
1-41
5-52
3-33
3-36
3-35
3-43
3-35
3-47
3-43
3-45
3-38
3-37
3-44
3-44
3-39
3-47
3-45
3-42
3-34
3-44
3-32
3-43
3-45
3-37
7
Light (cont.)
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-39
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning .................................................. 3-37
Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-45
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 3-17
Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-17
Entry ......................................................... 3-16
Perimeter ................................................... 3-18
Theater Dimming ......................................... 3-17
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Interior Lamps ............................................. 3-16
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-20
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-39
8
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-47
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-45
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-41
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-40
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-36
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-36
MP3 ............................................................. 3-95
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-43
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-39
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-43
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-20
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-36
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-36
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................... 3-18
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-34
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage ...............................................
Park
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Park Aid ........................................................
Park Brake ....................................................
Parking
Assist ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
5-97
2-29
2-32
2-37
2-29
2-37
2-33
9
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-34
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-29
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-61
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-KEY® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-18
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 2-19
Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
California ..................................................... 5-4
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-18
Phone
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-99
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-99
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-44
Retained Accessory ..................................... 2-22
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-34
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-31
Privacy .......................................................... 7-17
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-17
Navigation System ....................................... 7-18
OnStar ....................................................... 7-18
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-18
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-10
10
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-31
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ...................................................... 7-18
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-83
Radios
Reception ................................................. 3-112
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-82
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-110
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................... 3-18
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-35
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-26
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-44
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-53
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
United States Government ............................ 7-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-69
Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-22
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-20
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-34
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-32
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-93
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Center Seat .................................................. 1-7
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-7
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-49
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-47
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50
Security Light ................................................. 3-43
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle ................................................ 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................ 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-40
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-45
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66
11
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-82
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-97
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-29
Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-89
Installing .................................................... 5-79
Removing ................................................... 5-78
Storing ............................................... 5-84, 5-87
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-106
Speedometer .................................................. 3-32
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-7
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-23
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-110
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-47
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-48
Cupholders ................................................. 2-47
Glove Box .................................................. 2-47
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-19
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-48
12
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-32
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 5-50
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-37
Theater Dimming ............................................ 3-17
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-110
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-18
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 2-19
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-82
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-39
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 5-96
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-69
Chains ....................................................... 5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Cleaning .................................................... 5-97
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-89
Different Size .............................................. 5-71
Tires (cont.)
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-76
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-61
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-67
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-64
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-62
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-78
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools ........................................ 5-84, 5-87
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-68
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-26
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-26
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-7
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-37
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-8
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-37
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26
Trunk ............................................................ 2-12
Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-45
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Universal Home Remote System .......................
Operation ...................................................
2-37
5-72
2-43
2-43
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Loading ...................................................... 4-20
Running While Parked .................................. 2-34
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-45
Symbols ......................................................... iii
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-98
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-98
13
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-74
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-30
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-45
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74
Different Size .............................................. 5-71
Replacement ............................................... 5-74
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
14
Windshield
Replacement ............................................... 5-53
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-35
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-53
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-95
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-99
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-98
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-113
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2